ﮔﺮاﻣﺮ ﺑﺮای ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ - 1ﺑﻬﺎﺭ 1383
ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﭘﻮﺭ
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
1
ﺯﻜﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﻨﺸﺭﻩ ﺃﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
2
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ
ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ: .1ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ
8
.2ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﻪ ﮐﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟
10
.3ﻣﻌﺮﻓﯽ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ
11
.4ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ )ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺍﻣ ِﺮ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﯼ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ(
12
• ﻓﺎﻋﻞ • ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ • ﻓﻌﻞ • ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ • ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ • ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ • ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ • ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ • ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ • ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )ﻣﻌﻴﻦ( • ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒThe • ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ • ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ mustﻭ have to .5ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ )ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ(
23
.6ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ
26
.7ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
30
.8ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
33
To Do .9
36
.10ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ
38
.11ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ:
Simple future tense
42
m co e. ag gu
.13ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ tell & say
47
.14ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
48
.15ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ
50
.16ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ
53
w
w
w
.ir l
an
.12ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ
44
3
.17ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ :
54
.18ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ »ﺍﺯ« ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ
55
» .19ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ « Future Continuous Tense
58
.20ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎSequence of tenses :
61
«Used to » .21 » .22ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ « Question tag
62 66 Avoid Repatition
.23ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ
The additions
.24ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ Æ
.25ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ .26ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ .27ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
CAN
69 71 73
MUST Æ
73
WANT
74
Æ
Some &any .28
76
.29ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
78
.30ﺩﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ
82
.31ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ:
84
possesive forms
m co e. ag gu
.33ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ
86
Reflexive pronouns (self ) .34ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ
87
Here & There .35 » « it .36ﺑﺤﺚ
89 92
.37ﺻﺮﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ 16ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
94
» .38ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ «
95
.39ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ) ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ( :
100
» .40ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ « ) ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ (
106
.41ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
108
.42ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
109
.43ﺻﻔﺖ adjective
111
The same as .44 .45ﻗﻴﺪ adverb
115 118
.46ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ intensifiers (very, too, enough) :
123
Such .47 .48ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ tooو enough
127 129
» .49ﺩﻳﮕﺮ« »«Other
130
.50ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ Relative Pronouns
136
w
w
w
.ir l
an
.32ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ Putting two sentences together :
85
4
.51ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ
141
.52ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
145 Conditionals
.53ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ » Otherwise .54ﻭﺍﻻ« « Wish » .55
146 149 150
ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ـ ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ
.56ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝif
151
.57ﻭﻗﺘﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ» « It is time
151
.58ﺣﺬﻑ
152
IF
Unless .59 Would rather .60 as if – as though .61 » « in Case ) .62ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻪ(
153 154 156 157
Both .63 .64ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ active & passive voice :
158 159
• ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ • ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ • ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ • ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ • ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ • ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ • ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ • ﺟﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ : • ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. • ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ. • ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ .65ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ :
170
.66ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ
171
.67ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ reported speach
172
.68ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ Indirect speech
173
• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ .
m
• ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ
co
• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
e.
• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ:
ag
• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
gu
w
w
w
.ir l
an
• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ :
5
• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ : • ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ : .69ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ) ( gerund
181
.70ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ to
184
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
6
ag
gu
an
.ir l
w
w
w
7
m
co
e.
ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ : ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮﮊﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﮑﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ،ﺩﺍﻧﺸﺠﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻘﻘﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ،ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺍﻣﺮﯼ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ،ﻫﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ .ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ،ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪ ،ﻫﻢ ﺑﻘـﺪﺭ ﺗﺸﻨﮕﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺸﻴﺪ. ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ،ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ .ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﻤﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﯼ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ .ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﻭﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻮﻳﺘﺮ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ. ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ،ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ .ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﺳﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻗﻴﺪ ،ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﻧﺪﯼ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ. ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺗﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻭﯼ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻋﺰﻳﺰﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻬﺎﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺑﻨﺎﯼ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﺰﻳﺰﻡ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﮑﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻢ. ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺴﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻘﺪﺭﻡ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﮐﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﮑﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺩﺍﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻢ. ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻘﺪﺭﻡ ﺁﻗﺎﯼ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻧﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻨﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺮ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ،ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺯﺣﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﺪ .ﺑﺪﻭﻥ
co
m
ﺍﻏﺮﺍﻕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﯼ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ. ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺟﻤﻨﺪﻡ ﺟﻨﺎﺏ ﺁﻗﺎﯼ ﺭﺿﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﺗﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎﯼ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ
e.
ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﺸﮑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻋﺸﻖ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ
8
ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﺳﻨﺪﯼ: ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﮎ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﯽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ :
ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻡ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﭘﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎﺭ 1383
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﮕﺎﻥ ،ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺖ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ .ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﮏ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ.
ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ enayatpour@ce.uta.edu ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ. http://www-ce.uta.edu/~enayatpour/hmpg/mynotes.htm
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
9
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﻪ ﮐﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ،ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ،ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ،ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ,MCHE ،TOEFL ,IELTSﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ،ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
10
ﻣﻌﺮﻓﯽ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ:
ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﮐﻤﯽ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ :ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﮐﻤﯽ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ :ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ
ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻸ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻸ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ IELTS ،TOEFLﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ
IELTS ،TOEFLﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ .ﻳﺎﺩ
ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ .ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ
ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ
ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ
ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ.
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ.
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ :ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ: ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﮏ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
11
ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ :ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ
ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ +ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ +ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ +ﻓﻌﻞ +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ :ﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ ،ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺁﻣﺪ .ﺍﻭ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ
ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺎ
→ we
ﻣﻦ
ﺷﻤﺎ → you
→I
ﺗﻮ → you
ﺍﻭ
ﺁﻧﻬﺎ → they
→ he
ﺍﻭ → she
ﺁﻥ → it
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻌﻞ :ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ )ﻥ( ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﮐـﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ )ﻥ( ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ,ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ toﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ. ⇒ toﻥ → ﻣﺼﺪﺭ → ﻓﻌﻞ
m e.
co
see
to see ⇒ I
gu
ag
You see They see
an .ir l w w
w
12
ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ :ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ in the class
ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ at home
ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ hereﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ at school
ﺁﻧﺠﺎ there
ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ :ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ. ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ every other day ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ on odd days
ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ yesterday
ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ every day
ﺍﻣــﺮﻭﺯ today
ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻭﺝ on even days
ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ :ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﺳـﺎﻧﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ. ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ: 1ـ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ 2ـ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ 3ـ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺘﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﯼ thisﻭ thatﮐﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻳـﺎ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ: PL →this book these books
this → these
PL →that car those cars
that → those
ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ :ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺣﺴﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪHassan saw Ali .
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
m co
ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪHassan saw him .
e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
13
ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ
ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ـ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ـ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ
ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ
us
ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ـ ﻣﺮﺍ
me
You
ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮـ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ
you
ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ـ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ
him
ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭـ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ )ﺯﻥ(
her
them
ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ـ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ
it
ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ
ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ
our
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮ
your
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ
their
ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮ
my your
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ
his
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ
her
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ
its
ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )ﻣﻌﻴﻦ( :ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ toﻧﻤـﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺟـﺰ ﺩﺭ ought toﻭ .used to
m
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ should
e.
co
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ may
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ must
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
14
ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ can
ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ: -1ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ -2ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ،ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜـﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺭﻓـﺘﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ،ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ )ﺁﻳﺎ ـ ﻣﮕﺮ ـ ﻟﺤﻦ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤـﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ doﻭ doesﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﺳﺆﺍﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺁﻳﺎ
ﺳﺆﺍﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ?Can you go
ﻣﮕﺮ
ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻢ ﺑﺮﻡ I can go
ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ؟
?Can you
ﻟﺤﻦ ?You can
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ Iﻭ weﺑﻪ youﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ you ? :
am → are
I
-3ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ )ﻥ( ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻲ (not) ،ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ. ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ am notﻭ may notﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. Can not → Can ' t not → won' t
will
m e.
co
not → mustn' t
must
not → Shan' t
Shall
gu
ag
is not → isn' t
w
w
w
.ir l
an
are not → aren' t
15
am not → am not may not → may not
4ـ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ: ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ :ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ. ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ notﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ notﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ.
ﺁﻳﺎ
?You can’t go → can’t you go
ﻣﮕﺮ
?You can not go → can you not go
ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ؟
ﻟﺤﻦ
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ: ﻣﻌﻨﻲ
ﻣﻌﻨﻲ
ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ was-wereﺑﻮﺩﻥ
ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
Has-hadﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
-
Does-didﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ
-
ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )To be(am-is-are Have Do
canﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ
could
ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
Shouldﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
Shall
ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
Wouldﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
Will
ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
Mightﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
May
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ
Had toﺑﺎﻳﺪ
Must
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ
ought to
ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ
m co e. ag
gu an .ir l w w
w
16
Used to
ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
need
ﺟﺮﺃﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
Dare Would rather
ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ
Had better
ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻩ
:The ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ،ﺭﺍ ـ ﻛﻪ ـ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ( I eat apple. I eat the apple. I eat the apple which is red. ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ " ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ" ،ﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ " ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ"، ﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ . .ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ " ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺐ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ" ،ﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ،ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻳﻲ :ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧـﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ،ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ am-is-areﺑﻪ beﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ to haveﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺟﺎﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ
e.
co
m
ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ.
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
17
must be
am → I
can have
I
have → I
I
You are → You can be
you have → you can have
He is → he must be
They have → They can have We have → we can have She has → she can have
Am Be
Have to have
Is
Has
are
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. 1ـ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻲ؟ 2ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 2ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ؟ 3ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻼﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ؟ 4ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ؟ 5ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﻲ؟ 6ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻢ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺱ؟ 7ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. 8ـ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﻫﺎﻳﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. 9ـ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
m co
10ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ.
e.
11ـ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
18
: ﭘﺎﺳﺦ 1. Can’t you help me here every day? 2. Mustn’t you teach us here every other day at 2 o’clock? 3. Am I not bad tempered? 4. Don’t they study here every day? 5. Don’t you listen to the teacher every day? 6. Can I be polite in class? 7. My father must be kind at home. 8. My sisters may be lazy. 9. Their parents can be here. 10. My father can have lunch. 11. He may have a car
ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ :""ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ( ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻭto) ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ-1 used : ﻭ )ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎought to ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞto ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ-2 have ﻭhas ﻳﻌﻨﻲTo have ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭam-is-are) ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲTo be ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ.(to ( ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩhave-has ﻭam-is-are ) ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﺼﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ .( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪhave , be) ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ
like
ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
refuse
ﺍﻣﺘﻨﺎﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
would like
ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
plan
ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
hope
ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
decide
ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ
wish
ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
intend
ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
an
.ir l w w w
19
co
ﻭﺍﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
e.
pretend
ag
ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ
gu
want
m
:ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﺼﺪﻱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ
ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
be going to
ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
try
ﻣﺘﻨﻔﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
hate
ﻗﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ
promise
ﻣﺘﻨﻔﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
dislike
ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ
prefer
ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ mustﻭ : have to )ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ( ﻣﻦ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ
I must go I have to go
ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ must )ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ـ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ( have to has to
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻮﻕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ had to ، mustﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ. ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ has , haveﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. I will have my lunch.
ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻫﺎﺭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ.
She has a book.
ﺍﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
have
داﺷﺘﻦ و ﺧﻮردن → اﺳﻢ + has
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ (to) has , haveﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
have ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ → + to has
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
20
:ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ؟، ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ،ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ .ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ1 .ـ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ2 .ـ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ3 .ـ ﺍﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ4 .ـ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺎﻝ ﺯﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ5
: ﭘﺎﺳﺦ 1. They want to listen to the teacher every day. • Do they want to listen to the teacher every day? • They don’t want to listen to teacher every day. • Don’t they want to listen to teacher every day? 2. I must speak English every day. 3. You want to be polite here. 4. He likes to have a car. 5. We decide to be clever this year. .ﺏ( ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮﺍﻧﺘﺰ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ 1. They Study engineering ( Plan:) ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ 2. Most students succeed (want) 3. We understand the lesson. (Pretend: )ﻭﺍﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
w w
21
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
4. I work hard. (Promise ) 5. Most of the people fact/tell the truth. (refuse) 6. You are very successful. (can) 7. They practice sentence patterns (must) 8. Many students ask questions (may) 9. We are polite. (Ought to) 10. I dine with you. (would like) 11. We play football. (prefer)
: ﭘﺎﺳﺦ 1. They Plan to Study engineering 2. Most students want to succeed. 3. We pretend to understand the lesson. 4. I promise to work hard. 5. Most of the people refuse to fact/tell the truth. 6. You can be very successful. 7. They must practice sentence patterns. 8. Many students may ask questions. May they not ask questions? May not they ask questions?
ﺳﺆاﻟﯽ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ
9. We ought to be polite. → ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲOught you to be polite? Are you ought to polite? → ﻣﻨﻔﻲYou ought not to be polite. You aren’t ought to polite. → ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲOught you not to be polite? aren't you ought to polite?
w w
22
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
10. I would like to dine with you. 11. We prefer to play football.
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ )ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ(
Simple Present Tense
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ :ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :ﺍﮔﺮ toﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ) (it-she-heﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ) (ies-es-sﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ : -1ﻭﺟﻮﺩ sﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ : He works/she eats/it runs -2ﻭﺟﻮﺩ esﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ :ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ z,o,x,ch,sh,sﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ esﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ: Washes/buzzes/watches/fixes/misses/mixes
-3ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ yﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ” “a,e,I,o,uﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻓﻘﻂ s
ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. Æ Playsﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ play Æ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ yﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ yﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ iﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ esﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ . Carry Æ carries StudyÆ studies
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
23
-4ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ :
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ every + ﻳﺎ
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ each +
) ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﻭﺯ ( during the dayﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ during + )ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ( every other weekﺯﻣﺎﻥ every other +
-5ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ : ever – never – always – usually – often – sometimes They never play golf. ﻼ ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. -6ﺑﺎ ﺣﻘﺎﻳﻖ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ The sun sets in the west.
ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﺮﺏ ،ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ does ,doﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ s ) does :ﭘﺮﺍﻥ es -ﭘﺮﺍﻥ ies -ﭘﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ doesn’tﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ( ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ :ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ. He goes to school every day.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
24
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. -1ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ -2ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 2ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻭﺝ -3ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ -4ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ
ﭘﺎﺳﺦ: He goes to school every day. The teacher helps us in the class at 2 o’clock on odd days. My father studies at home on even days. His father wants to help them here every day
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
25
1. 2. 3. 4.
Question Words.
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ. -1ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ:
whoﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ
-2ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ :
whomﻛﻲ ﺭﺍ ،ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ
-3ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ:
whatﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ
-4ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ:
whereﻛﺠﺎ
-5ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
whenﭼﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ -ﻛﻲ
-6ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how manyﭼﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ
-7ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how muchﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ
-8ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
howﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ
-9ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ what timeﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ -10ﺍﮔﺮﻣﺪﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how longﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ
-11ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how oftenﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ
-12ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
اﺳﻢ whose +ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ
-13ﺍﮔﺮ an, aﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ. -14ﺍﮔﺮ + theﺻﻔﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ that ,this ,those ,these +ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ whichﻛﺪﺍﻡ.
-16ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how oldﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﻪ
-17ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how farﭼﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺘﻲ
-18ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how tallﭼﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﻱ
-19ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how fastﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ
-20ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
what colorﭼﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ
e.
co
m
-15ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
whyﭼﺮﺍ
ag
gu an .ir l w w
w
26
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ (wh questions): ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ -1ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ .ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ : Where When ?do you work
How Why
+
What time How often How fast
?Can you answer
I can answer Æ
?can you answer
Why
?can you answer
When
?How fast can you answer ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ -2ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ. Where do you go? Æ I know where you go
ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻱ
Why don’t they study Æ I know why they don’t study ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ I am sure why he is happy
ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﻭ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ -3ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ sﻭ ﻳﺎ esﻭ ﻳﺎ iesﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ .
m
He works
e.
co
ﺍﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ؟
gu
ag
?Who works ?Whose brother works
w
w
w
.ir l
an
ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﻛﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ؟
27
?Which teacher works
ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؟
?What kind of student works
ﭼﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ؟
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. -1ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ : 2 -2ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ -3ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻨﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ -4ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﻛﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ؟ -5ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ.
ﭘﺎﺳﺦ:
I know where you play football every day at 2 o’clock. I don’t know why the students don’t study at school. I am sure why they are tired. ?Do you know whose brother wants to speak English I am not sure why they are lazy in class.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
28
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
have to ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ
: ( have to ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ)ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ .ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ-6 ﭘﺴﺮﻩ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻩ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ-7 ﺩﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ-8 ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻩ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ-9 ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻩ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ-10
:ﭘﺎﺳﺦ 6. They have to speak English in class. 7. The boy has to be polite in class every day. Does the boy have to be polite in class every day? The boy doesn’t have to be polite in class every day. 8. The girls have to be here on even days. Do the girls have to be here on even days? 9. He has to play football every other day.
ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ
Does he have to play football every other day?
ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ
He doesn’t have to play football every other day.
ﻣﻨﻔﻲ
Doesn’t he have to play football every other day?
ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ
10. Ali has to be happy in class Does Ali have to be happy in class?
w w
29
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ :ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ-ﺩﺍﺭﻱ -ﺩﺍﺭﺩ-ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ-ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ-ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ »ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ« ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ be +ing
ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ. subject + to be + verb + ing
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ be :ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ are,is,amﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ingﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ . ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ :ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ are , is , amﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ : ﺍﻟﻒ :ﻭﺟﻮﺩ are,is,amﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺏ :ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ingﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺝ :ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺣﺎﻝ -ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ
now at present
m co e.
ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ -ﻓﻌ ﹰ
ag an
gu
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ
for the time being at the moment
w
w
w
.ir l
This morning 30
This year This week ﺩ :ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ: !hush up
ﺳﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺵ
stop
ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺵ
keep
ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻦ
look
ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻦ
listen be careful
ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺵ
Listen! Someone’s knocking the door
ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻦ – ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻪ!
Look! Someone is coming. Be careful he is eavesdropping.
ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺵ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺳﻤﻊ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻪ!
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ : -1ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ing -like-know-understand-wantﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ. -2ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ingﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ yﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ingﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺴﺒﺪ. PlayÆplaying StudyÆstudying CarryÆcarrying -3ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ eﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ingﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ eﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ingﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﻓﻌﻞ
co
m
beﻛﻪ eﺁﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
e.
Come Æcoming
ag gu
Take Ætaking
w
w
w
.ir l
an
Have Æhaving
31
Be Æbeing -4ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ) (a,e,i,o,uﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ingﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ingﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. SitÆ sitting Put Æ putting Read Æ reading -5ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ieﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ingﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ieﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ yﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ingﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺴﺘﻦ
tie Æ tying
ﻣﺮﺩﻥ
die Æ dying
ﻟﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ –ﺩﺭﺍﺯ ﮐﺸیﺪﻥ
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
32
lie Æ lying
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ :ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ. ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ edﻳﺎ iedﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ. ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ:
ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ : -1ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ:
-2ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ:
see Æ saw
)ﺷﮑﻞ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(:
work Æ worked
)( ed-ied
do Æ did am , is Æ was are Æ were have Æ had go Æ went come Æ came see Æ saw
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ :ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ didﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ didﻳﺎ didn’tﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ edﻳﺎ iedﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ
e.
co
m
ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ag gu
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ:
an .ir l w w
w
33
-1ﻭﺟﻮﺩ edﻳﺎ iedﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ. -2ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ: ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ yesterday Æو last day the other day Æ
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ
two days ago Æ
ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ
Æﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ in +
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ )( in 1920 ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ :ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ yﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ed ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ. play Æ played stay Æ stayed ∗say Æ said ∗pay Æ paid ﻭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ yﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ yﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ
ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ iﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﭙﺲ edﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ iedﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. carry Æ carried study Æ studied try Æ tried
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
34
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. -1ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 2ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ -2ﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﻙ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 5ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ -3ﻣﺎ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ -4ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ 1367 -5ﻣﺎ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ -6ﭘﺴﺮﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﺑﻮﺩ
ﭘﺎﺳﺦ: 1-They helped us in the class at 2 o’clock yesterday. 2-We saw you in the park at 5 o’clock last week. 3- We wanted to go to school the other day. 4-We liked to be polite in the class in 1367 year. 5- We were tired yesterday. 6- The boy was lazy last year.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
35
:ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺢ To Do You
did.
ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
Did you do? ﮐﻤﮑﯽ
ﺍﺻﻠﯽ
He does.
Does he do?
Did he do?
Yes he did.
. ﺗﻮ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ-1
You had to go. Did you have to go? You didn’t have to go
ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ
. ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ-2 He has to go. Does he have to go?
ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ
. ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ-3 He had to teach. Did he have to teach?
. ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ-4
co
m
My father was here yesterday.
ag
e.
. ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ-5
gu
Their parents were kind last year.
w w
36
w
.ir l
an
.ﻣﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ-6
I was teacher last year. -7ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻧﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺁﻣﺪ They were studying when my father came in. -8ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺩ My brother was playing the piano when his teacher rang.
-9ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺁﻣﺪ. Their parents were watching the news when it was raining. ﺗﺬﻛﺮ :ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ whenﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ
ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
37
ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ : ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﺋﻴﻢ ) (toﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﺋﻴﻢ youﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ: please Æ
ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ
will you ( please) Æ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ) ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺣﻤﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻪ
would you Æ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻩ
could you Æ
ﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﻨﻜﻮﺭﻱ : ﻓﻌﻞ ingﺩﺍﺭ would you mind + ﻓﻌﻞ ingﺩﺍﺭ +
do you mind
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ youﺑﻮﺩ youﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ . ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ to beﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ youﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ aren’tﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ don’t beﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻳﻚ againﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ . ) ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ( ) Æ don’t go againﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ( you don’t go ) ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ (
) Æ don’t be againﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ( you aren’t
e.
co
m
) ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ(
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
38
don’t (you) ever go (again).
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. -1ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ . -2ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺲ. -3ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺣﻤﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻦ. -4ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. -5ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺵ. -6ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺵ. -7ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻜﻦ.
-8ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﻦ. -9ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﻧﻨﻮﻳﺲ. -10ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ. -11ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺑﺪ ﺍﺧﻼﻕ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ. -12ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺑﻲ ﺍﺩﺏ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ. ﭘﺎﺳﺦ:
1-Please study here every day.
m e.
co
2-Please write a letter.
ag
3-Would you please speak English.
an
gu
4-Would you mind listening to the teacher. 5-Please be polite here.
.ir l w w
w
39
6-Please be happy. 7-Don’t play football here again. 8-Don’t open the door again. 9-Don’t write on the black board again. 10-Don’t be lazy again. 11-Don’t be bad temper again. 12-Don’t be rude again.
:ﻣﺮﻭﺭ . ﻣﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ-1 I work here every day. I am working here now.
ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
I worked here yesterday.
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
I was working here yesterday.
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
Work here every day.
ﺍﻣﺮﻱ
. ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﺩ-2
m
My father will buy a car tomorrow.
e.
co
. ﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ-3
gu
ag
I will pass in the next year.
w w
40
w
.ir l
an
. ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ-4
They will be here in three weeks. . ﻣﺎ ﺑﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ-5 We will win soon. . ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺯﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ-6 You will be clever sooner or later. ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﹰﺍ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ-7
w w
41
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
Ali will study later.
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩSimple future tense : ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ :ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ +ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ + will / shall +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ) (willﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ shallﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ: ﺍﻟﻒ( ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ willﻭ ﻳﺎ shallﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )( tomorrow
ﺏ( ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ
ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ : ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺩ
tomorrow soon sooner or later
ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ
three weeks
ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ next +
( a week/ a year/ a monthﺯﻣﺎﻥ in+
)ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ،ﻳﮏ ﺳﺎﻝ ،ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ :ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ willﻳﺎ shallﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ notﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ
m e.
co
won’tﻭ ﻳﺎ shan’tﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ.
an
gu
ag
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ willﻳﺎ shallﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻣﮕﺮ
Æ
.ir l w w
w
42
unless
ﺍﮔﺮ
if Æ
whenÆ
ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ
as long as Æ
while Æ
ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ
suppose Æ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ
before Æ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ
as soon as Æ ﺑﻤﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ
after Æ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ
till Æ until Æ
to pass Æ
ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﻜﻪ
ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ
ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎ
: ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ
( I ) ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ+ before + ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ( II ) before + ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ You will pass if you study. If you study you will pass. I will call you as soon as I get home.
w w
43
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
As soon as I get home , I will call you.
ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ )ﻛﻪ ( ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪﺟﺎﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ thatﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ. ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ +ﻓﻌﻞ +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ + that +ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ +ﻓﻌﻞ +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )(1
2.
3
1.
that
3
2.
1.
I know that you come.
ﻣﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻲ
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ) :(2ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ thatﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ toﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ. 1. 2. 3 to 2. 3
1. 2. 3 that 1. 2. 3
I want you that you go Æ I want you to go
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ) : (3ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ thatﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ not toﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ. I want you that you don’t go. I want you not to go. ﺗﺬﻛﺮ :ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ notﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ . )(to go Æ not to go
m e.
co
)(to be or not to be
gu
ag
)ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻦ(
Not to go Not to come
an .ir l w w
w
44
not to write ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ) :(4ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ thatﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ toﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ . let
ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ I let you go.
Æ
I let you that you go. Æ I let you to go make
ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
I make you that you be. Æ I make you to be Æ I make you be. see
ﺩﻳﺪﻥ It helps to prevent
ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
help
ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ
hear
ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
watch observe feel
ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
have
ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻦ
know
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
notice
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ) :(5ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ thatﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﻢ
co
m
ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ingﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ.
e.
go.ﻳﺎ I see you that you go. Æ I see you going
ag gu
go.ﻳﺎ I saw you that you go. Æ I saw you going
an .ir l w w
w
45
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
-1ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﻲ. -2ﻣﻦ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ. -3ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ. -4ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ. -5ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﻧﺪﻱ. -6ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻲ.
1. want you not to play football here. 2. I am happy that you are lazy. 3. They like to speak English. 4. I let you laugh here every day. 5. I saw you studying. 6. I see you listening to the teacher.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
46
ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ
tell & say
ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻦ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ sayﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ saidﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ) ﺑﻪ ( ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ tellﻛﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ toldﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ )ﺭﺍ( ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﮔﻔﺘﻦ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ meanﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ meantﺍﺳﺖ. Æ
ﺗﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ /ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺗﻮ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ
I mean you
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ tellاز ﻛﻠﻤﻪ say toﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ tellﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ
to tell a lie Æ
ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ
to tell a story /tale
ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ
to tell a fact Æ
ﺟﻚ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ
to tell a joke Æ
ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ
to tell the time Æ
ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ
to tell one’s name Æ
ﻓﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ
to tell the fortune Æ
ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ
m co
ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ
to tell the difference Æ to tell the news Æ
e. ag
ﺭﻣﺰﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ
gu an .ir l w w
w
47
to tell the secret Æ
ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ: -2ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ
-1ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ
-1ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ :ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ :
every dayﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ
-1ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ :ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ : usually Æ
ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ
hardly Æ
ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ
some times Æ
ﻏﺎﻟﺒﹰﺎ
frequently Æ
ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ
rarely Æ
often Æ
ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ
always Æ
ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ
seldom Æ
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻﹰ ،ﻋﻤﻮﻣﹰﺎ
generally Æ scarely Æ
ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ everﺑﻪ neverﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ . ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ 4ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ. -1ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ. I always go there.
ﻣﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ.
-2ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ
m e.
co
ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ. They are always late.
gu
ag
ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ .
w
w
w
.ir l
an
They can always play.
48
-3ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ . ?Do you often go there ﺑﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ – ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ . Yes I often do. - I often go there. -4ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﹰﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ. ) ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ 2ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ )(.ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺎﮐﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ doﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(.
I always do go. I never did go.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
49
ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﻢ . ﺁﺏ ← ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻳﺎ
ﭘﻮﻝ ← ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﺋﻤﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ،
ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ : Theﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ )ﺭﺍ -ﻛﻪ – ﻛﺴﺮﻩ( ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ: ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ
a-an
ﺟﻤﻊ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ
some
ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ – ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ
any She has a pen.
She has some pens ?Dose she have any pen ?Doesn’t she have any pen
an , aﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ : -1ﺍﮔﺮ uﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﻳﻮ( ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) (aﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ) (uﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ )ﺁ( ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) (anﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
m e.
co
) Æ (aﻳﻮ Å u Æﺁ (an) Å
ag w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ
50
a university
a used car
ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻬﻨﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺘﺮ
an umbrella
ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻮ
an uncle
-2ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ) (oneﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ) (aﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ: A one story building. A one eyed man. A one celled animal. -3ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ) (hﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) (aﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ) (hﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ anﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ(
an hour
ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻜﺎﺭ
an honest man
ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺩ ﭘﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺨﺎﺭ
an honor man a hand
ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺖ
a hen
ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﻍ
a hat
ﻳﻚ ﻛﻼﻩ
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ) :(1ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ theﺑﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻮﻫﻬﺎ – ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻫﺎ -ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ -ﺟﻨﮕﻠﻬﺎ -ﺧﻠﻴﺠﻬﺎ –ﺻﺤﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ . ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ) :(2ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ theﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ . The god, The sun, The earth, The moon, The sky
m e.
co
•
ﺑﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ Theﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ :
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
51
ﺷﻤﺎﻝ
The north
ﺟﻨﻮﺏ
The south
•
ﺷﺮﻕ
The east
ﻏﺮﺏ
The west
ﻗﻄﺐ ﺷﻤﺎﻝ
The north pole
ﻗﻄﺐ ﺟﻨﻮﺏ
The south pole
ﺑﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ Theﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ . The bible
ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
The koran
ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ
The torah
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ made ofﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ. Butter is made of the milk. •
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ) (′sﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ Theﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ.
•
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ Theﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
•
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ Theﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ . ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ
The United States of America The Soviet Union
ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺟﻤﺎﻫﻴﺮ ﺷﻮﺭﻭﻱ
The Nether land
ﻫﻠﻨﺪ
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
52
ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ :
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ
ﺟﻤﻊ ours
ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ
mine
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ
yours
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ
yours
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ
theirs
ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ)ﻣﺬﻛﺮ(
his
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ )ﻣﺆﻧﺚ(
hers
ﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ )ﺷﻲﺀ(
its
it is mine book. ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﮑﻲ
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
53
Æ
book ﺍﺳﻢ
It is my ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﮑﯽ
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ : ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )(of
•
ﺩ ِﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ Å
the door of the class
ﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ Å ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ِ
the legs of the table
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )(′s
•
ﻣﺎﺩﺭِ ﻋﻠﻲ Å
Ali’s mother
ﺏ ﻋﻠﻲ Å ﻛﺘﺎ ِ
Ali’s book
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ sﻳﺎ esﻳﺎ iesﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ) (′sﻓﻘﻂ ) (,ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﻭ )(s ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ . ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ
•
Å
the students’ parents
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ) (′sﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ . ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ Å
•
the children’s parents
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ) (′sﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ Å
today’s news
ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ Å
tomorrow’s news
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
54
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ »ﺍﺯ« ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ . ﺍ ِﺯ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ: ( )ﺍﺯof -1 One of the students Five of the chairs Ten of the cars : ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ: from -2 Take the knife from the child. Take the book from the desk. I work here from morning to / till night. I walk from here to/till my house. from here to my house is 2 kilometers.
to be from
Æ
ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
to come from
Æ
ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ : ﻣﺜﺎﻝ. ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ: out of -3
I go out of the class. I pulled him out of the pool. out of sight , out of mind my car is out of order
m
.ﺍﺯ ﺩﻝ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻓﺖ
e.
out of the work
co
.ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻢ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ
gu
out of the practice
ag
.ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
w w
55
w
.ir l
an
.ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ
: through -4ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ . ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺳﺘﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ. The river passes through this village. ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻢ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ. I can see through the glass. ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻦ. Don’t look through the pipe. ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ. The water passes through the pipe. : than -5ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ erﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ moreﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ . ) ﭘﻴﺮ ،ﭘﻴﺮﺗﺮ ،ﭘﻴﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ (
old → elder → eldest old → older → oldest
)ﻗﺸﻨﮓ ،ﻗﺸﻨﮓﺗﺮ ،ﻗﺸﻨﮓﺗﺮﻳﻦ( beautiful → more beautiful → the most beautiful My brother is older than me. : since -6ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ – ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ – ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ – ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ . Since you are my friend I want to help you. ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻢ .
co
m
Since he is a good worker, I want to employ him. ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻨﻢ .
e. ag
an
gu
: how -7ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ -ﭼﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ . ?How do you know my name
.ir l w w
w
56
How do you know my address? How do you know my telephone number? . ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻥto buy Æ at -8 . ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻥto buy Æfrom
I bought the book from Ali. I bought the book from my father. I bought the book from my teacher. I bought the bread at the baker’s.
w w
57
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
I buy the meat at the butcher’s
Future Continuous Tense
« » ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦwill ﻭﻳﺎshall ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ .ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ
Subject + shall /will + be + V.ing I shall be working I will be working He/she/it will be working You will be working We shall be working We will be working They will be working . ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪwill ﻭshall ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ: ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ . ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪI, We ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ I shan’t be studying. you won’t be going swinming. Shall I be seeing you tomorrow? Will you be coming here tomorrow? Shan’t I be working all day? Won’t they be watching TV tonight ?
: ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ:ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ : ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ-ﺍﻟﻒ
m
.ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺻﺒﺢ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ
I will be seeing you tomorrow
an
gu
: ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ-ﺏ
ag
e.
co
We will be sitting in the class and studying tomorrow morning.
w w
58
w
.ir l
.ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺖ
We will be having a test next week
.ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ
: ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ all + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥÆ all day tomorrow ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ+ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩÆ This time next session At 7 o’clock next session At 9 o’clock tomorrow/ tonight
: ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ .ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ . ﻣﻦ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ-1 . ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ-2 . ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻛﻤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﻪ-3 . ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻭﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺍﺫﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻲ-4 . ﺍﻭ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ-5 1- I had to be sure that that book didn’t belong to you. 2- I had to do every thing that he told me. 3- He said that he couldn’t help me in this time. 4- I didn’t know that you wanted to bother me.
w w
59
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
5-He thought that you might not come here.
: ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ .ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ . ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ-1 . ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ؟ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ8 ﺍﻣﺸﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ-2 . ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻮ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ. ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻢ3 ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ-3 . ﻣﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ-4 . ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ-5
1- Will you be working all the day tomorrow? 2- What will you be doing at 8 o’clock tonight? I am watching TV. 3- I will come at three o’clock good!/well! I will be waiting for you. 4- We had better go out because Reza will be playing the piano.
w w
60
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
5- Do you think when we get there, they will be waiting for us.
ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ:
Sequence of tenses
ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ .ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: -1ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻩ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﺍﺵ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺶ ﻣﻴﮕﻪ. He said that he had to do whatever his elder brother said. -2ﺍﻭ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻨﺪ. He knew well that he didn’t have the right to fire me.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
61
» «Used to ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ) ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ -ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ – ﺍﻭﻧﺮﻭﺯﻫﺎ -ﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﻬﺎ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ didﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: He used to smoke a lot.
ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺳﻴﮕﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪ.
?Did you use to study here
ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻱ.
I didn’t use to see him very often.
ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ.
ﻳﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ
else where :
ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ
someone else :
: Used toﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻧﺎﻇﻢ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ He used to be the dean of high school but he isn’t now ,again. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ used toﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ wouldﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻋﺎﺩﺕ -ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ
used to/would Æ used to Æ
m co e. ag gu
ﻳﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ
an .ir l w w
w
62
else where :
someone else :
ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ :ﻣﺜﺎﻝ . ﻣﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻲ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﻡ-1
Whenever I needed some money, I used to/would go to my mother.
. ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ-2 He used to work else where.
ﻼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﺪﺭﺕ ﻗﺒ ﹰ-3 Did your father use to have a car?
.ﻼ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﻴﺪﻡ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒ ﹰ-4 I used to sleep late, but I get up early now.
. ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ-5 We used to live another the city. . ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ-6 Some one else used to be our teacher.
:ﺗﺬﮐﺮ
To be used to
co
.ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
m
+ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ/ ﺍﺳﻢ/ ing ﻓﻌﻞ
e.
to be used to ﻳﺎto get used to
w w
63
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
. ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ) ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪTo get used to
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﭼﺮﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ
to take a nap : to do exercises : or else :
She is used to cats. She is used to her mother. She is used to taking a nap after lunch. ﺑﻌــﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣــﻲ ﺗــﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳــﻢ ،ﺿــﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳــﺎ ﻓﻌــﻞ ingﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷــﺖ usedﺩﺭ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟــﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑــﺮ ﻛﻠﻤــﻪ accustomedﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ. Some of you aren’t used to standing in front of the class but don’t worry, gradually you will get used to it.
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
m co e.
-1ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺳﻴﮕﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﺶ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﺑﻬﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ.
ag
ﻼ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ. -2ﻣﻦ ﺍﺻ ﹰ
gu
w
w
w
.ir l
an
-3ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺒﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻛﻨﺪ.
64
. ﺍﻭﻟﺶ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ-4 . ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮﺕ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ-5 . ﻧﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ – ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ، ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ-6 . ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺨﻮﻧﻪ-7
w
65
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
I Don’t smoke so much, or else you will get used to it. I’m not tired at all. I’m used to working for hours. He is used to doing exercises every morning. At first, we weren’t used to this teacher but , at last we got used to him. He is used to take a nap after lunch. Are you used to living in this area. No I am not (used to living here) Don’t worry, at last you get used to it. He is used to reading book before sleeping.
w
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
» ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ
« Question tag
ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ) ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ -ﻣﮕﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻃـﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ -ﻭ ﻫﺎﻥ(ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ: -1ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ notﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ : -1ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﯼ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ؟ ?We must obey the regulations , mustn’t we -2ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻬﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻪ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻬﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻪ ،ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﻧﻪ؟ ?He can trust us , can’t he -3ﺁﻥ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻭﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻭﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻡ ،ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻡ؟ ?I believed what you said , didn’t I
-2ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻼ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﮓ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﺪ – ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ?She isn’t afraid of the dog, is she
ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺗﻬﺎﻡ ﺩﺯﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﺩﻧﺪ – ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ?They didn’t accuse him of stealing, did they
co
m
ﺗﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻬﺖ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﻨﮓ -ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ?You don’t like to be called stupid, do you
e. ag
an
gu
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : 1ﭼﻮﻥ am notﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ aren’t Iﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ am I notﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ :
.ir l w w
w
66
ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻭﻓﺎﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ?I am faithful to ypu ,aren’t I ?I am faitful to you, am I not ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ?I am kind to the children, aren’t I ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : 2ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑـﺎ thereﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﭘﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ ?Money doesn’t bring luck, does it
ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻤﻮﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ. ?The students are willing to stay more, aren’t they ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ. ?Ali reza is waiting outside, isn’t he
ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ. ?There is no class today, is there
ﺁﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ. ?That book doesn’t belong to you, does it
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : 3ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
e.
co
m
Hardly / Never / Barely / No / Seldom/ None/ Rarely/ Little / Scarcely / Few
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﺳﻪ؟ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
67
Money goes nowhere nowadays, does it?
.ﻟﻴﻼ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ Leyla never tells lise, dose she?
shall we ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ) ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ( ﺿـﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺳـﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺷـﺎﻥlet’s ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ: 4 ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻲ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻬﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺎﻱ؟ Let’s go to tell him every thing , shall we? Let’s study together, shall we?
: ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩtag : 5 ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ Will you- would you- can you- could you Do me a favor, will you? Come and see us, will you?
w w
68
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
Don’t be so stingy, will you?
Avoid Repatition
ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ
ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ aﻭ anﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ oneﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ Any & some .ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑـﺎ noﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺯ noneﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ) ﻫـﻢ ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣـﻲ
ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ tooﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ eitherﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.
I want to buy a car.
ﺍﺳﻢ
a/an
)(1 one, too I want to buy one, too.
I like some cold drink.
ﺍﺳﻢ Some
)(2 I like some, too.
I don’t have any change.
some, too
ﺍﺳﻢ any
)(3 I don’t have any, either.
any, either
m co e. )(4
an
gu
ag
We have no class today.
w
w
w
.ir l
We have none, either. 69
ﺍﺳﻢ
no
none, either
to know of: to be willing: party :
ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻲ . ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ. ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻴﻮﻩ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ-1
I want to buy some fruit , I want to buy some too.
. ﺍﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ-2 He has a lot of good friends in this class, I have some too
. ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ-3 I have no time to answer the telephone , he doesn’t have any either.
. ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﻭ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ. ﻣﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺭﻭ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ-4
m
I know of a good doctor, I know of one too
e.
co
. ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ-5
w w
70
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
They arent willing to go to that party , either.
The additions
» ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ «
ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ » ﻫﻢ _ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ « ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ:
ﻓﺎﻋﻞ +ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ Æ so +ﻣﺜﺒﺖ +tooﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ Æﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ +ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ Æ neither +ﻣﻨﻔﻲ + eitherﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ Æﻣﻨﻔﻲ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: -1ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺳﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ. He is in a good mood today, so am I/ I am too.
-2ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﺵ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ. He used to study here, so did his brother/ his brother did too.
-3ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ – ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ. He doesn’t have to work with you, neither do the workers/ the workers don’t either.
m
-4ﺍﻭ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ.
e.
co
He won’t attend the class tomorrow, his friend won’t either/ neither will his friend.
ag
an
gu
-5ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ. I thanked him, so did ali.
.ir l w w
w
71
. ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻼﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﺍﺷﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ-6 He didn’t say hello to me, neither did his brother.
. ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ-7 He is one of my old friends , so is ali .
. ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ، ﻣﺎ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ-8 We will have a test next week , so will they.
. ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ، ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﻧﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻭ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻢ-9
w w
72
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
I can’t understand your words well , neither can he.
Æ
ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
CAN
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ canﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ
ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ » « will be able toﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ. ) ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ( can Æ will be able toﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ) ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ – ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ( can Æ canﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
-1ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻱ. You can come with me tomorrow, provided you ask your father’s permission.
-2ﭘﺎﻳﻢ ﺑﺪ ﺟﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻢ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺗﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﻢ. My foot hurts painfully, I won’t be able to play on the team tomorrow.
MUST Æ
ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ mustﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ
co
m
will have toﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
e.
)ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ(
must Æ Will have toﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
ag
)ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ(
gu an .ir l w w
w
73
must Æ Mustﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
-1ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻲ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ) ﻭﺍﻻ ( ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ. You must do what I say, or else I will fire you.
-2ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻜﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻲ. If you want to pass in the university enterance examination , you will have to study hard.
ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
Æ
WANT
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ will wantﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺼـﻤﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ to be going toﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ +ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ want +
Æ
expect
ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ،ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
ﻓﻌﻞ to be going to +
Æ
intend
ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ،ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ will want +
Æ
need
ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ،ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ +ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ Want +
m co e.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ag
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ﻣﻦ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﻮﻟﻢ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ – ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ – ﺍﺯﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻢ ﺭﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ.
74
want ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
I will want my money next week - I’m going to buy a car- I want you to pay my
w w
75
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
money back.
Some &any some -1ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ – ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻲ – ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻔﻬـﻮﻡ ) ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭﻱ – ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻲ – ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺑـﻪ anyﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: I want to buy some books.
ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ.
some people say that he is crazy.
ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﺯﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
There is some cold water in the jar.
ﭼﺮﺍ ﺗﻮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻱ؟
?why didn’t you eat any fruit
ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻓﻮﺯﻩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ . I don’t want any of you to fail.
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : 1ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ someﺍﺳﺖ. ?You look thirsty , do you want some water
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : 2ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻓﻲ someﺑﻪ anyﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ?would you like some more tea
ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﭼﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ؟
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : 3ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ someﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ. You should have a good command of english because some day , some student may ask you some question that you can’t answer. ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺴﻠﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﻲ – ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯﻱ ) ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ( – ﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻱ ) ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ( ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻳـﻚ
m e.
co
ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ.
ag
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ any : 4ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
76
.ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﭼﻲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ؟ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻲ
w w
77
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
What would you like for lunch? Any thing you like.
» ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ «
ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ – ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﻲ
some body Æ
ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ – ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﻲ
Æ
some one
ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ
Æ
some thing
ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ – ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ
some where Æ
ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ – ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ
some place Æ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ someﺍﺯ everyﻳﺎ anyﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ: ﻫﻤﻪ – ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺲ
Æ
every body
ﻫﻤﻪ – ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺲ
Æ
every one
ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ
Æ
every thing
ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ
every where Æ
ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ
Æ
every place
ﺍﮔﺮ noﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ someﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ.
m co e.
ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ
Æ
no body
ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ
Æ
no one
ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰ
Æ
no thing
ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ
Æ
no where
ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ
Æ
no place
ag
gu
ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
some body / every body / nobody / any body → works
78
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ’sﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ elseﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ’sﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ. Some body ﺍﺳﻢ + ’s + ﺍﺳﻢ + else’s +
every body no body any body
ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ someﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ noﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ noﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ anyﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ. Somebody knows him.
ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ
Nobody knows him.
ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ.
He knows somebody.
ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ
He knows nobody.
ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ
He doesn’t know anybody.
-1
ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ.
-2
ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﮕﻔﺖ.
-3
ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻨﺪ.
-4
ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ.
?Is anybody going to say anything
Nobody told me anything yesterday.
m co e.
I want every body to understand this matter.
ag
gu w
w
w
.ir l
an
Some body’s brother said some thing else.
79
Some body else’s brother said some thing else. .ﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
-5
We are going to visit some where else. : ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖsome ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ
some body/some one
ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﻲÆ some people
ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ
some thing
ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻱÆ some things
ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ
some where/some place
ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲÆ some places
ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ
: ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ. ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩother ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ: Else
some body else
ﻳﻚ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮÆ some other people ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ
some one else
ﻳﻚ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮÆ some other people ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ
some thing else
ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮÆ some other things ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ
some where else
ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪÆ some other places ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪÆ some other places ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ
what other people?
w
w
w
.ir l
an
ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ؟
80
ag
gu
. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖwhat ﺍﺯsome ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ
e.
co
m
some place else
what other things?
ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ؟
what other places?
ﭼﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ؟
:ﺍﮔﺮ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ some body else / some one else
Æ who else?
ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﻲ
some thing else
Æ what else?
ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﭼﻲ
Æ where else?
some where else/ some place else
ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﺠﺎ
: ﻣﺜﺎﻝ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩwho else’s ﺍﺯwhose else ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱwho else ﺍﺯwhom else ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ: ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
-1
ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﻡ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﻲ؟ What other people are you going to invite for dinner?
ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؟
-2
ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ؟
-3
ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ؟
-4
ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻪ؟
-5
Who else’s car is outside?
What other things does he know?
e.
co
m
Who else liked to come here with you?
w w
81
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
Who else’s brother knows this matter?
» ﺩﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ «
ﭼﻮﻥ thisﻭ thatﻭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ theseﻭ thoseﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
/ ’sﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ + of +ﺍﺳﻢ this,that,these,those + This book of Ali’s. This book of mine. -1
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ.
-2
ﻣﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﻭﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻢ؟
I already know this brother of yours.
?May I borrow those two english books of yours
-3
ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺴﺮ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺁﻗﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺫﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ. This son of Ali’s always bothers us.
-4ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪ. These students of ours like to write more persian sentences.
-5ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﺪ. One student of mine wants to know the fact.
m co
-6ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ.
e.
This teacher of ours sometimes doesn’t listen to our words.
ag gu an
-7ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﻼﺳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ.
.ir l w w
w
82
Some of your classmates decide to come here next Friday. . ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺑﺸﻪ-8
w w
83
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
This elder brother of yours can make friends with that good student or friend of mine.
ﺣﺎﻻﺕ
ﻣﻠﻜﻲ:
possesive forms
-1ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ -2ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ of -3ﻭ ′s : own -4ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ـ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. His father owns a factory.
ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ -ﻛﺎﺭﺧﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ.
I used to own a bicycle.
ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﭼﺮﺧﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ.
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ownﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ. ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﻪ that is my own car.
ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻪ؟
?whose car is it
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ : belong to :ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ. This fountain pen belongs to me.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ
?Whom does this fountain pen belong to
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
84
ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ :
Putting two sentences together
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ keepﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ )ﻛﻪ( ﺑـﻪ )ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻳـﺎ( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ifﻳﺎ whetherﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ. » ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ،ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ« . ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧـﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ) ( or notﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ whetherﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ) ( or notﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ whetherﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. I want to know if you will come here tomorrow on Friday. I want to know whether you will come here tomorrow on Friday. I want to know whether or not you will come here tomorrow on Friday. I want to know whether you will come here tomorrow on Friday or not. ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
85
» ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ « ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻲ -ﮔﻔﺘﻴﺪ – ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﺪ -ﺑﺒﺨﺸﻴﺪ ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ did you sayﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ .ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ did you sayﺗـﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑـﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ?Where are you going
ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ؟
?Where did you say, you are going
ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ؟
? How much money do you have on you
ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻫﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ؟ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻫﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ؟
?How much money did you say you have on you
ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ،ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ » ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ « ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ » « do you thinkﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : ? Who is he
ﺍﻭ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟
m
?Who do you think he is
e.
co
ﺍﮔﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟
? How old are you
gu
ag
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﺘﻪ ؟ ﺍﮔﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﻤﻪ ؟
an .ir l w w
w
86
?How old do you think I am
» « self
ﺑﺤﺚ :
-1ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ،ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ،ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ،ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ،ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ،ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ،ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ،ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ » ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ « ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
Reflexive pronouns
ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ
ﺟﻤﻊ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ
ourselves
ﺧﻮﺩﻡ
myself
ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ
yourselves
ﺧﻮﺩﺕ
yourself
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : ﭼﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻱ؟ ?Why didn’t you introduce yourself
ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻪ. I think she is crazy, she is talking to herself.
m e.
co
-2ﺍﮔﺮ selfﻫﺎ ،ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ،ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ.
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
87
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : ﺗﻮ ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺯﺩﻱ ؟ You told it to me, yourself. You, yourself told it to me. ﺍﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ. They invited us themselves. They themselves invited us. -3ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ selfﻫﺎ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ byﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ » « all byﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﭘﺴﺮﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ. My son is old enough to go to school by himself. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ. He is sitting at the door all by himself and crying. -4ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ selfﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ) ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺪ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ toﻭ forﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. I take the books with me/ myself she has some money on her/ herself close the window behind you/ yourself she made address for herself I read the text to myself
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
88
Here & There hereﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻭ thereﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
Here ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ +ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ + There
Here ﺍﺳﻢ +ﻓﻌﻞ + There ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ) ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ – ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎﺷﻢ ( ) ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎ – ﺩﻳﺪﻱ (
Here I am. Here you are. Here it is .
) ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎﺵ (
There they are.
) ﺍﻭﻧﺎﻫﺎﺷﻦ (
There are the children
) ﺍﻭﻧﺎﻫﺎﺷﻦ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ (
Here comes the bus.
) ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻴﺎﺩ (
There goes your fathre.
) ﺍﻭﻧﺎﻫﺎﺵ ﭘﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻴﺎﺩ(
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
89
» ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻓﻲ « ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ
Help your self:
ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ(
you first:
ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ(
after you:
ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ-ﺧﺎﻧﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻭﻝ – ﺧﺎﻧﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﺮﻧﺪ
ladies first:
ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻴﺪ
please be seated:
ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ
go on:/ go ahead
ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ
who is speaking:
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ there isﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺍﺯ there are ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻳﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺒﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺭ. There is a pen in my pocket , come and take it.
ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻭﻣﺪﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ. When I came in, there were two pens on my desk. ﻳﻚ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺦ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ. There is some cold water in the refrigerator.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
90
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. -1ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻲ؟ -2ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺑﭙﺮﺱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ؟ -3ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ؟ -4ﺍﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ. -5ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ. 1- I want to know whether you are going to buy or rent the house. 2- Ask him if he can lend you some money. 3- I’m not sure whether he will come to the meetting with me or not. 4- He lives in this small home by him self. 5- I wish I could see my self as others see me.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
91
» « it
ﺑﺤﺚ
ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ itﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺋﺐ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:
-1ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍ : ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : It is hot today. It is cold today. ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ.
It was raining.
ﻫﻮﺍ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.
It is sunny.
-2ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ : ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : Hurry up ! it is getting late .
ﻋﺠﻠﻪ ﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻪ. ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ? ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 5ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ 2
What time is it ? it is five to two.
.
What time is it ? it is five to two. -3ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ : ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : it is far.
ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ.
?How far is it from here
co
m
ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ؟
it is about 5 miles.
ﺣﺪﻭﺩ 5ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ.
e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
92
: ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ-4 .ﻛﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ؟ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ Who is it at the door? It must be Ali. : ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ-5
it + is / was / will be + ﺻﻔﺖ+ ( for + ) ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ+ﻣﺼﺪﺭ
.ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ It is easy. It is easy to speak English. It is easy for you to speak English. : ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪit -6 That is it
It is a pity :
ﺧﻮﺩﺷﻪ
ﺍﻓﺴﻮﺱ ﺣﻴﻒ ﺷﺪ
It pays well/ it is worth it: ﻣﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺩ – ﺍﺭﺯﺷﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ
Be it so : ﺁﻣﻴﻦ – ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻪ
take it easy:
it is time:
ﺑﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ – ﺳﺨﺖ ﻧﮕﻴﺮ
it makes no difference :
ﻓﺮﻕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ + ﻓﻌﻞ+ ing
ﻓﺎﻳﺪﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ،ﺑﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ
It is none of your business
ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ
w
93
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
It isn’t up to you
w
it is no Use/ Good
ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ
ﺻﺮﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ 16ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
1 I take.
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
2. I am taking.
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
3. I have taken.
ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ) ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ( ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ) ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ (
4. I have been taking .
1. I will take.
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
2. I will be taking.
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
3. I will have taken.
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
4. I will have been taking.
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
1. I would take.
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ
2. I would be taking.
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
3. I would have been taking.
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
4. I would have taken.
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ،ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
1. I took.
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
2. I was taking.
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
m
3. I had taken.
e.
co
ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ -ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
4. I had been taking.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
94
» ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ « = along -1ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ. = acrossﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ. I went across the street. ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩ. I saw him walking along the street yesterday.
ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻧﺪﻭﻳﭻ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻲ ﺁﻧﻄﺮﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ. There is a sandwich shop across the street.
: against -2ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺿﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
They voted against us.
ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺃﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ.
It is against regulations.
ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ.
-3ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ byﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ inﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ onﻫﻢ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ onﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻳﻢ.
co
m
By bus , By taxi , By car , By subway , By plane ) By land , By sea , By air , By train ( rail road
e. ag
in/on a bus
gu
in the car , in my car
w
w
w
.ir l
an
on a bicycle , on a horse
95
inside : outside # inside -4ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻀـﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ out sideﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻼﺱ ﮔﺮﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ. It is hotter inside the class than outside.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ. The door is locked from inside.
in # out , into # out of -5 inﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ) ﺩﺭ ،ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ،ﺗﻮﻱ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻫـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ intoﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ .ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ out # inﻭ ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ out of # into ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : the student are in class.
ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺳﻨﺪ
come in.
ﺑﻴﺎ ﺗﻮ
go out.
ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺱ
come into the class.
ﺍﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ
go out of the class.
ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﭘﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮ ﻭ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻏﺮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ.
m e.
co
He jumped into the pool with his clothes on and pulled the drowning boy out of the
an
gu
ag
pool.
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ inﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
.ir l w w
w
96
in the room , in the office
ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ
in the yard , in the gardan
ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ
in the river , in the sea
ﻣﺎﻳﻊ
. ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩin ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥthere , here ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ:ﺗﺬﮐﺮ Come in here.
to be out.
ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ
to let in.
ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ
to let out.
ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ
to breathe in.
ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﻡ
co e. ag gu an .ir l
to breathe out.
ﺩﻡ
m
to be in.
ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ
97
w
to eat out.
ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ
w
to eat in.
ﺍﻭﻧﺠﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﺶ
w
Don’t smoke in there .
ﺑﻴﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ
: at -6ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﻛﻨﺎﺭ – ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ – ﺩﻡ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ table , deskﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : ﺍﻭ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻡ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ. He is sitting at the window and watching out.
ﺑﺸﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺪﻩ . Sit at your desk and teach. ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﻣﻜﺎﻥ in :ﺑﺰﺭﮒ – atﻛﻮﭼﻚ The plane will land in Tehran at Mehrabad airport.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ at :ﺑﺰﺭﮒ in -ﻛﻮﭼﻚ He works at the oil company in accounting department. ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ » « officeﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ: ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﻧﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. Mr Jones is somewhere at the office but not in his office. : on -7ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻨﺸﻴﻦ ،ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ. Don’t sit on the floor ! sit on the chair.
: over & above -8
e.
co
m
ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﻛـﻪ over ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ aboveﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ag
ﻭ ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ under # overﻭ below # aboveﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
gu an .ir l w w
w
98
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ؟: 1ﻣﺜﺎﻝ Where should I write my name? over the line or under it . . ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ: 2ﻣﺜﺎﻝ There are four lights above our heads. ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﺖ ﭼﻴﻪ ؟: 3ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
w w
99
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
What is it under your foot
ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ) ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ( : ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ :ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ .
ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : : Aﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺍﺳﺖ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ For ،ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ ﻧﻤـﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ +ﺍﺳﺖ +ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
Õ
ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: I have known him for two years.
ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ. 5ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
He has had this car for five years.
: Bﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺍﺯ « ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ »ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ) ﺍﺯ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ sinceﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ.
e.
co
m
ﺍﺯ +ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ +ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ +ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ Õﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ag
an
gu
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 2ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ. He has been here since two o’clock.
.ir l w w
w
100
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺍﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. He hasn’t gone to school since last week.
:
Cﻭﺟﻮﺩ ) ﺍﻡ ـ ﺍﻱ ـ ﺍﺳﺖ ـ ﺍﻳﻢ ـ ﺍﻳﺪ ـﺎﻧﺪ ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: I haven’t notified them.
ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻡ .
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ :for -1
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ for + for two weeks.
ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ for the last/ past + for the last two weeks.
ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ
: since .2
ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ since +
m
since yesterday
ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ
co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
101
since + last + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ since last week
ﺍﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ
ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ: since / since then/ever since -3 .ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ He left for England two weeks ago and I haven’t heard from him since/ since then/ ever since.
.4
ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ+ since + ( ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩI ) it is + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ+ since + ( ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩII )
.( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩII) ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﻪsince ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯI) ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ
. ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ: ﻣﺜﺎﻝ It has been three months since we started this term.
w w
102
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
It is three months since we started this term.
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. -1ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻪ. -2ﺩﻭ ﺗﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. -3ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺒﺢ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. -4ﺳﻪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ. -5ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ.
1- He has been very upset since his friend died. 2- We have studied English for two terms but we can’t speak. 3- He hasn’t eaten anything since morning. 4- He has taught mathematics in this school for three years. 5- He has been here for an hour and a half. : recently- lately .5ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﹰﺍ – ﺗﺎﺯﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ – ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺍﻭ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. He has recently / lately bought a new car.
e.
co
m
ﻼ -ﺍﺑﺪﹰﺍ -ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ -ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﻛـﻪ : ever-never .6ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ -ﺍﺻ ﹰ everﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﻣﺎ neverﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
103
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ؟ ﻧﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻡ. ? Have you ever been to England No, I haven’t ever been to England. No, I have never been to England.
.7ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺎﺿـﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ. So far by now up to now up till now up to the present time.
I have reviewed this lesson twice so far.
: already .8ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻈـﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣـﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. We are late , the bell has already gone/ rung.
: just .9ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ – ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ -ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﻪ -ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
co
m
ﻣﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻡ. I have just finished my work.
e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
104
: yet .10ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ » ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ « ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺁﻧﻜـﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻛﻤﻜـﻲ ﻭ notﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ notﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ؟ ? Have you notified them yet ﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩﺍﻡ. No, I haven’t notified them yet. No, I have not yet notified them. ﻼ -ﺣﺎﻻ ﻧﻪ – ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: : yet .11ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻓﻌ ﹰ don’t do that yet.
ﻼ ﺍﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻭ ﻧﻜﻦ. ﻓﻌ ﹰ
don’t tell them anything yet.
ﻼ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﮕﻮ. ﻓﻌ ﹰ
: still .12ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ – ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ -ﺑﺎﺯ -ﻫﻢ -ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ stillﺑﻪ anymore/ any longerﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: I used to study English. Do you still study English. No , I don’t study English anymore/any longer.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
105
» ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ « ) ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ( ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ :ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ. ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : : Aﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺑﻮﺩ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ» ﺑﻮﺩ « ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ forﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
:A ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ » +ﺑﻮﺩ « +ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ Åﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + For +ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : 1ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻢ. I had known him for two years. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : 2 /ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻮﺩ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ. He hadn’t eaten anything for three days when we took him to the doctor.
: Bﻭﺟﻮﺩ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻡ – ﺑﻮﺩﻱ – ﺑﻮﺩ – ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ – ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ – ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ،ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ.
co
m
ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : 1/ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ He said ( that ) he had notified you before.
e.
gu
ag
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : 2/ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ. I thought ( that ) you had understood every thing.
an .ir l w w
w
106
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻲ :
Subject + had + past participle
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ :
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ + when/before +ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻣﺪﻱ ﺗﻮ.
I had gone when/ before you came in
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ + after +ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
ﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ .
I come in after you had gone.
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ + since +ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱYou had gone since I had arrived. . ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻓﻮﺯﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ. I had taken no examination since I had failed.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
107
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ :ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :ﺍﮔﺮ ) ﺗﺎ +ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ) ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ +ﺍﺳﺖ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ .ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ : )(byﺗﺎ +ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ +ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ (For) +ﺍﺳﺖ +ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ Åﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ .
ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ + by +ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ Subject + will have been + verb + ing+ for +
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 8ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ . We will have been studying for two hours by eight o’clock.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ 10ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ . We will have been living in tehran for ten years by next month. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ :ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ Will
m e.
co
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ :ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ :
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ By +
108
ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ :ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ" ﺑﻮﺩ" ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ.
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ( For ) +ﺑﻮﺩ +ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ Åﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. ﻓﺎﻋﻞ + before/when +ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ Subject + had been + verb + ing + for + ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ +
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: -1ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻭﻣﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ. I had been teaching for half an hour when you came. -2ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ. I had been doing the cooking for two hours before you called.
co
m
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ :ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ hadﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
e.
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ :ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ before, whenﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
109
talkative :
ﭘﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ
crowded :
intelligent :
ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺵ
taciturn :
ﺛﺮﻭﺗﻤﻨﺪ
110
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ
w
considerable :
rich :
ﺯﺷﺖ
ﻛﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ
w
ugly :
ﺷﻠﻮﻍ
ﺻﻔﺖ
adjective
ﺻﻔﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻼ: ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ careful student .
ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻼ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﻣﺜ ﹰ
my new green book.
ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻡ
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﺻﻔﺖ + to be +ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ + to get +ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ + to turn +ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ + to become +ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ + to grow +ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ + to make +ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻥ – ﺷﺪﻥ – ﮔﺸﺘﻦ – ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻥ ( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﻨﺒﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑـﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ link verbﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ : My father grew angry . ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
In spring the leaves turn green Today the weather got cold .
ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪ.
m co e.
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ( .
ag w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ﺻﻔﺖ +
Seem / Appear/ Look/ Sound/ Taste / Smell / Feel
111
ﻼ: ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ he looks( angrily ) angry.
ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ .
the soup tastes ( unusually ) unusual.
ﺳﻮﭖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ.
ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ this, thatﺑـﺎ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: These books .
This book Æ
Those books .
That book Æ
ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ :ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ : ﻼ: -1ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ :ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Helen is as tall as Susan.
ﻫﻠﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ . ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ :
as as
ﺻﻔﺖ ﺻﻔﺖ
as not so
Hellen is as tall as Susan. Hellen is not so tall as Susan.
m co e.
-2ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ) ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ( :ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ag
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ﻼ :ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ . ﻣﺜ ﹰ
112
ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ) ( thanﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷـﺎﻥ ﻼ: erﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Hellen is taller than Susan. ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ) ( moreﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. My book is more interesting than yours .
ﻼ: ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﹰﺍ ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ.
-3ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ :ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻼ :ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ . ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ theﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ ﻼ: ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )ﺗﺮﻳﻦ( ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ estﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Hellen is the tallest student in the class . ﻼ ﻭﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ mostﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ My book is the most interesting book in the library.
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ :ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ erﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ estﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ . happy → happier than → the happiest busy → busier than → the busiest ﺍﻣﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ moreﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ mostﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. Active / more active than / the most active
e.
co
m
Comic / more comic than / the most comic
ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ :ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ
ag
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.
113
ﻣﻄﻠﻖ
ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ
ﻋﺎﻟﻲ
good – well
better than
the best
bad - ill
worse than
the worst
much many
More than
the most
Little
Less than
the least
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ
elder ------
the eldest
ﻓﺮﺩ – ﺷﺨﺺ
older than
the oldest
old ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ
Farther than
the farthest
ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ
Further than
the furthest
w w
114
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
far
The same as : sameﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ theﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ) ﻼ: ﻫﻤﺎﻥ – ﻳﻚ ( ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Hellen and Jane live in the same street. ﻫﻠﻦ ﻭ ﺟﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ .
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ :ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ) ( er , re , le , owﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ erﻭ estﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﺪ .ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ most , moreﻫـﻢ ﺗﻔﻀـﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ.
ﻋﺎﻟﻲ
ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ
the most narrow
ﻣﻄﻠﻖ
more narrow than
narrow
the narrowest
narrower than
narrow
the most simple
more simple than
simple
simpler than
simple
the simplest the most clever
more clever than
clever
the cleverest
cleverer than
clever
the most obscure the obscurest
more obscure than obscurer than
obscure obscure
ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ :
co
m
-1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ happyﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺷـﺪﻥ er,estﺣـﺮﻑ y
e.
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ iﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
happy → happier than → the happiest
115
-2ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ eﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ wideﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ st , rﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. Wide Æ wider than Æ the widest -3ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻧﻜـﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ bigﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ erﻭ estﺣـﺮﻑ ﺑـﻲ ﺻـﺪﺍﻱ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. Big Æ bigger than Æ the biggest
ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻔﺶ
a pair of shoes
ﺷﻠﻮﻍ
crowded
ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ
trousers
ﮔﺮﻓﺘﺎﺭ – ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ
busy
ﻗﻴﭽﻲ
scissors
ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ
noisy
ﻋﻴﻨﻚ
glass
ﻧﯽ -ﻗﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺷﻨﻮﻳﺴﻲ
cane
ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ
ball point pen fountain pen
ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ : the same
m e.
co
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ the sameﻛﻠﻤﻪ asﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ the same asﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ
) ﻣﺜﻞ – ﺷﺒﻴﻪ – ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ
gu
ag
ﻼ: ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ likeﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
w
w
w
.ir l
an
Your shoes are the same as mine.
116
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ the sameﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ asﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
+ asﺍﺳﻢ the same +
ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ the sameﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : Hellen is as old as Susan. Hellen is the same age as Susan.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ . ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ
size
ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍ
ﺑﺰﺭﮒ
big
tall -
length
ﺩﺭﺍﺯ
long
ﭘﻬﻨﺎ
width
ﭘﻬﻦ
wide
ﻋﻤﻖ
depth
ﻋﻤﻴﻖ
deep
age
ﺳﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ
height
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
117
ﻣﺴﻦ – ﭘﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ – ﺑﻠﻨﺪ
old high
ﻗﻴﺪ
adverb
ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ lyﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﻣـﻲ ﻼ: ﻛﻨﻨﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﻣﺨﻠﺼﺎﻧﻪ
sincerely
ﻣﺨﻠﺺ
ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ
quickly
ﺳﺮﻳﻊ
ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ
carefully
sincere quick careful
ﺩﻗﻴﻖ
ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻼ: ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ Hellen speak slowly . Hellen apeaks English slowly .
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﺜﻼً : He left the room quickly .
ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ lyﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ lyﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ. Long
Short
Hard
Fast
Early
Late
Much
Little
Just
Still
Far
Near
Low
Soon
Straight
Enough
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
118
a nap
ﭼﺮﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺵ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ
a shower
ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
a test-exam
ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ
a bath
ﺩﻳﻜﺘﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ
a dictation
Take
a trip
ﺳﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
a vehicle
ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
-1ﻫﻠﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ . Hellen doesn’t behave the same kind as her father . -2ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ.
m e.
co
-3ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.
gu
ag
-4ﺍﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
He types the letters faster than my secretery.
119
-5ﻣﻦ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ. I never get up later than my parents . -6ﺍﻭ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ. -7ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. -8ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ. -9ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ. -10ﺍﻭ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ. ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ .ﻃﺒﻌﹰﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ : Hellen is a fast typist. Hellen is fast. ﻼ: ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Hellen types fast. ﻗﻴﺪ Hellen looks fast. ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻂ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ lyﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ : lovely
ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ
ﺻﻤﻴﻤﻲ
friendly
ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ
worldy
ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ
likely
ﭘﺪﺭﺍﻧﻪ
fatherly
ﻣﺎﺩﺭﺍﻧﻪ
ﺯﺷﺖ
ugly
ﺍﺣﻤﻘﺎﻧﻪ
e.
co
m
ﺷﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ
kingly
ﻣﺮﮔﺒﺎﺭ
deadly
ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ
motherly sily sisterly
ag gu an
Hellen is a friendly girl.
.ir l w w
w
120
ﻼ ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ lyﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﺜ ﹰ ﮔﻔﺖ friendlyLYﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Fashion Way
ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ
………… In a/ an +
Manner
ﻫﻠﻦ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ. Hellen speaks in a friendly manner.
ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ :ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ : ﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﻱ ﺳـﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳـﭗ ﻣـﻲ -1ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ :ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﻛﻨﺪ . ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ.
as as
ﻗﻴﺪ
ﻗﻴﺪ
as
not as/not so
Hellen types as slowly as Susan. Hellen doesn’t type so/as slowly as Susan.
co
m
ﻼ: -2ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ :ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
e.
ﻫﻠﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
121
ﺑﻴﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ .ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ lyﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ more thanﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ly ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ erﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: Hellen drives more slowly than Susan. Hellen drives faster than Susan.
-3ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ) ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ( :ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣـﻲ ﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ. ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ "ﺗﺮﻳﻦ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ lyﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﺶ the mostﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ly ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ the estﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ،ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ : Hellen types the most slowly. Hellen types the fastest. ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ “ﺗﺮﻳﻦ” ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ :
ﺑﻪ ...........
ﺗﺮﻳﻦ
} ﻭﺟﻪ /ﺻﻮﺭﺕ /ﺷﻜﻞ {
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
122
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ
ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ intensifiers :
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ much, manyﮐﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠـﯽ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ much + ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ many + ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ muchﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ manyﺍﺳـﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. muchﻭ manyﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ?Has Hellen written many letters ?Does Hellen drink much coffee Helen has not written many letters. Hellen doesn’t drink much coffee. ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺯ a lot ofﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ،ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ : Hellen has written a lot of letters. Hellen drinks a lot of coffee. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ tooﻳﺎ veryﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .
Too
ﺻﻔﺖ /ﻗﻴﺪ +
e.
co
m
Very
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
123
ﺯﻳﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠﯽ
:ﻼ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰvery ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ: too & very ﻓﺮﻕ The park is very beautiful. The teacher speaks very fluently. : ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖtoo ﺍﻣﺎ It is too cold today. That driver drives too slowly. :ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰmany ﻭmuch ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯtoo, very There were too many cars in the street. Hellen drinks too much water in a day. She knows very many words. Thank you very much.
. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩvery , too ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ، ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲenough ﻛﻠﻤﻪ
ﻗﻴﺪ/ ﺻﻔﺖ+
enough
You are rich enough . He speaks fluently enough . :ﻼ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰenough ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ They spend enough money in a month .
Little
co
m
: ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ
e.
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ
ag
ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ
w w
124
w
.ir l
an
gu
Few
: few & littleﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻧﺪ. I have little money in my pocket. He knows few words.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ fewﻭ littleﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ )(a ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ.
a little
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ
ﻳﮏ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ
a few
I drink a little coffee after dinner. He has a few books in his book case.
ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
all plenty of – a great deal of – a lot of
a lot of – a large number of – plenty of
most
most
much
many some
ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ
ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ
some -------
several
m co
a little
e.
a few
ag
little
few
gu w
w
w
.ir l
an
no 125
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻼ: ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ She Spends little money and I spend much. ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
126
Such ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ: ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. Helen hasn't said such words. Helen doesn't like such weather. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ Such a/anﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: Such a child can't stay quiet. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ Suchﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ:
ﺍﺳﻢ +
ﺻﻔﺖ Such a/an + I haven’t seen such an interesting film so far.
ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ Suchﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ soﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ:
ﺍﺳﻢ + a an +
ﺻﻔﺖ So + I haven't seen so interesting a film so far.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ Veryﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺍﺳﻢ +
ﺻﻔﺖ a + Very +
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
127
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
1ـ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﺬﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺷﻤﺰﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. 2ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻡ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ،ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ. 3ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ. 4ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﻐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ. 5ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﭼﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ. 6ـ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﻳﺔ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ. 7ـ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ. 8ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﻛﺎﺏ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ. 9ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﻮﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ. 10ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺒﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺑﻨﻮﺷﺪ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
128
enough وtoo ﺑﺎ
ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ
. ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪenough ﻳﺎtoo ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ . ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ:1
too + ﻗﻴﺪ/ ﺻﻔﺖ+ to ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ
She is too young to work. She drives too slowly to arrive on time.
ﺻﻔﺖ/ ﻗﻴﺪ+ enough + to ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ 1.She is rich enough to buy the house. 2.They work hard enough to earn a lot of money.
. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ:2
too + ﻗﻴﺪ/ ﺻﻔﺖ+ for ﺷﺨﺺ+ to ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ
1.The car is too expensive for me to buy. 2.You speak too fast for me to under stand.
ﻗﻴﺪ/ ﺻﻔﺖ+ enough + for ﺷﺨﺺ+ to ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ 1.The book is easy enough for us to read.
w w
129
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
2.You sigh beautifully enough for them to enjoy.
»«Other
»ﺩﻳﮕﺮ«
ﻼ: ﻛﻠﻤﺔ otherﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ John has polished other shoes too. ﻼ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ anotherﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ This child wants another toy. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ )ﭼﻪ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ the otherﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳـﺎ ﻼ: ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ I don't like this hat. I like the other hat. I don't like these shoes but I like the other shoes. ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ.
another +
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ
+
the other
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ
+
the other
Ö
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ Other+
ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ oneﻳﺎ onesﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ. another one the other one
other ones
the other ones
ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ anotherﻭ ) the otherﻣﻔﺮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
m co
ﻛﺮﺩ.
e. ag
I don't like this hat, I like the other. Hat.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
This child wants another hat.
130
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ otherﻭ ) the otherﺟﻤﻊ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ) (Sﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ـ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ → others )ﺍﻭﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺎ( ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ → The others I don't like these shoes. I Like the others. John has polished others too. ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ otherﻭ anotherﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ. ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ
each other
ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ
one another
ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ -ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺪ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﺷـﻮﺩ :ﺍﺣﻤـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻦ ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ. Ahmad and I know each other. People must help one another. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ togetherﺑـﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ )ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ـ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ to gatherﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷـﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ. Helen and jane study together. ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ otherﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺩﻳﮕﺮ« ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻫﺪ. every other days = on alternate days
co
m
ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ
the other day = some days ago
e.
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ
ag
ﻭﺍﻻـ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ
an
gu
other wise = or else on the other hand = in other words
ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ
.ir l w w
w
131
other than = except
ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ
one after another = one by one
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
1ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ. 2ـ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻢ ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ. 3ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ. 4ـ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ـ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻢ. 5ـ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ،ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ. 6ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. 7ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ. 8ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ. 9ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﺪ. 10ـ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
132
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
1ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ. 2ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺸﻨﮕﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. 3ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺩ. 4ـ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ. 5ـ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ﮔﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ. 6ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ. 7ـ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ. 8ـ ﻗﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. 9ـ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺟﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ. 10ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. 11ـ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﭼﻤﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ. 12ـ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﻴﺪ.
m e.
co
13ـ ﺗﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺒﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ.
gu
ag
14ـ ﭘﺴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ. 15ـ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻢ.
an .ir l w w
w
133
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
1ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. ?Isn’t this the largest building in this area 2ـ ﺍﻭ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ. He had picked the most beautiful flower from this garden. 3ـ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. Helen isn't so/as intelligent as her sister. 4ـ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ. He is supposed to take the most expensive present for his father.
5ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. Mr. Smith is the fastest typist in this office. 6ـ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ. Our house is more expensive than the house that you have bought. 7ـ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ. He used to live in the smallest house in this street.
m co
8ـ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ 24ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ.
e.
I could drive the longest road in this country for 24 hours.
ag
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
9ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
134
I think, your shoes are cheaper than mine .ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻡ10
w w
135
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
This is the most interesting present that I have bought.
ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ
ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ Relative Pronouns
ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ،ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﻗﺒ ﹰ Linkﻳﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ،ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ) +ﻛﻪ( ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ +ﺍﺳﻢ ﭘﺲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺧﺎﺻـﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ. ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ )ﻙ ـ ﻩ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ. 1ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ whoﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. The man.
The man works here.
…the man who works here. 2ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ whomﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. The man
I know the man.
…the man whom I know. 3ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ whichﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. The bus
The bus stops here everyday.
…the bus which stops here everyday. 4ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ whichﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. The book
I study the book.
m
…the book which I study.
e.
co
5ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ whereﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ag
they live in it.
The house.
gu
the house where they live ( in ).
w
w
w
.ir l
an
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ whereﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. 136
6ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ whenﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. I was born in the year.
The year.
The year when I was born. 7ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺁﻥ whoseﺍﺳﺖ. his wife works with me.
The man
…The man whose wife works with me. the dog the name of which was top of.
ﻳﺎ
…The dog whose name was Top
ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ whoseﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ whoseﺍﺯ
of whichﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ
ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ whoseﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ whoseﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ whoseﺍﺯ of whichﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. …The room whose door …The room the door of which 8ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ whoseﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. 9ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ whichﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ The thingﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ The thing whichﺍﺯ whatﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: The thing which you need is fresh air. What you need is fresh air. 10ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ whyﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. I study English for that reason.
The reason.
The reason why I study English is that I want to go abroad. ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ The reason whyﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ Thatﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻪ . because
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
137
ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻـﻮﻟﻲ ) ،(whoﻫﻤـﺔ ﺿـﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﻼ: ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ Theyﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ Thoseﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ we who work hard
I who work hard.
you who work hard
You who work hard. It who works hard.
Those who work hard.
She who works hard. He who works hard.
.1ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ 3 ،ﻣﻮﺭﺩ whom ، whoﻭ ) whichﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﺑـﺎ that ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: The man who works here is my uncle. that The man whom you saw yesterday wants you. that The house which is on the corner is mine. that The house which you bought is too expensive. that .2ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ whomﻭ ) whichﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ The man which you saw yesterday wants you. The house which you bought is too expensive.
.3ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ
co
m
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
e.
1ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ) (necessaryﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ) (definingﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.
gu
ag
ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ: ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
w
w
w
.ir l
an
a writer is a person.
138
ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ Personﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ ﻼ: ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ a writer is a person who writes novel. 2ـ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ) (unnecessaryﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ none definingﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ. ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ: ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Hafez is a great poet. ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣـﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻـﺪ ﺿـﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻼ: ) (unnecessaryﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ Hafez who lives in Shiraz, is a great poet. ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ) (unnecessaryﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﺎ ) (،ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﺸـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ none definingﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ definingﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
m e.
co
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ag
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
1ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.
139
2ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. 3ـ ﻣﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻢ.
4ـ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ. 5ـ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻮﺩ. 6ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ. 7ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻡ. 8ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ. 9ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ. 10ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
140
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ. does-didـ
to do
has-hadـ
to have
am-is-are-was-wereـ
to be
ـ ـ
to need can
Couldﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ Mightﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
may
ـ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ
must
Shouldﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
shall
Wouldﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
will ـ
used toﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ought toﺑﺎﻳﺪ
ـ
to be supposed toﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
ـ
had betterﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
ـ
would ratherـ
ـ
have toﺑﺎﻳﺪ
ـ
ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ) (can, may, shall, will, mustﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ
co
m
).(modal ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ .ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:
e. gu
ag
would-should-might-couldﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ،
w
w
w
.ir l
an
ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ. 141
1ـ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ :ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ) .ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ( Bob can come now. → Bob can come tomorrow. Bob could come now. → Bob could come tomorrow. ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻬﺎ ،ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. Bob could come yesterday. I knew that Bob could come. 2ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ: ﻼ: ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ Shouldﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ـ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ Helen should be resting.
)ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(
ﺣﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻼ: ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Hellen Shouldn’t be resting. ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ mayﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ
It may be raining.
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻼ: 3ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ :ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ can , must , mayﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪHellen must have seen the film. . ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ
e.
co
m
ﻼ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
142
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ might-ought to-should-could-wouldﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ. could should )ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ( would + have P.P might ought to ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: I should have gone there.
ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻢ(.
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ notﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑـﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ notﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: I shouldn’t have gone there.
ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ(.
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
m e.
co
1ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ .ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
gu
ag
2ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻤﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻤﺸﺎﻥ. 3ـ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ .ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺒﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
an .ir l w w
w
143
4ـ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻮﻫﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ. 5ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ(. 6ـ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻱ. 7ـ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻲ. 8ـ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ. 9ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻔﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. 10ـ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
144
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺘـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺗﺎ +ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ +ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ. I will have graduated from high school by next year. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺭﺿﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 5ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﻧﻪ. Reza will have returned home by five o’clock. ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. Subject + will have + Past Participle
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ: 1ـ ﺗﺎ +ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ← ) (By tomorrowﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ By + 2ـ ﺗﺎ +ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ←
in two weeks within
3ـ ﺗﺎ +ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ 4ـ
ﺗﺎ +ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
e.
co
m
by the time
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ +
as soon as
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
gu
ag
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ +
before
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
when
an .ir l w w
w
145
Conditionals
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ
ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ) (if clauseﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ ) (main clauseﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺷﺮﻁ ،ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ if +
ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﻣـﺎ )ﻭ( ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ + if +ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ .ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ: 1ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ :ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
if +
If Helen has money, she can buy the car. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ.
m e.
co
ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ) (Possibleﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
146
2ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ :ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ
ﻭ
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ +ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
if +
If Helen had money now, she could buy the car. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ. ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ) (imaginaryﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ. 3ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ :ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ
ﻭ
+ have + P.Pﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ have + P.P
if +
If Hellen had had money, she could have bought the book yesterday. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ. ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ،ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧـﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻳﺎ ) (impossibleﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.
ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻼ: ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ 1ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ.
m co
If I had money today, I would buy this book.
e.
2ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ.
ag w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
If I had money yesterday , I would have bought this car.
147
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ ﺑـﻪ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﻼ: ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ she doesn't try if she tried , she would succeed. ﻼ: ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ،ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ She didn't try, if she had tried , she would have succeeded.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
148
Otherwise
» ﻭﺍﻻ«
ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ: ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ if clauseﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻧﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ. They didn’t invite me, If they had invited me, I would have gone. ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ: ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ. They didn’t invite me; other wise, I would have gone. ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ otherwiseﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﺮﻃﻲ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: They don't invite me, other wise, I would go. ﻼ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ otherwiseﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Don’t smoke, otherwise, you will get used to it.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
149
» « Wish
ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ـ ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ wishﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ.
I wish to see them.
ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ.
I want to see them.
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ wishﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺵ ـ ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﺭﺯﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺘﻤﻲ ﻭﻳﻘﻴﻨـﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ wishﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺟـﺰﺀ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ: ﻼ: 1ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﺑﺎ wouldﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ I wish they would call me tomorrow. 2ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ.
I wish They called me now.
ﻼ: 3ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ I wish They had called me yesterday. ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
150
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝif ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ifﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ. on condition Pr ovidedﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ Pr oviding
Suppose ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ Suppo sin g
I will sign the contract provided you give me some money. ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ifﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. Suppose it rained now ، I would stay home.
ﻭﻗﺘﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻛﻪ» « It is time
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺗـﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫـﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻋـﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ،ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ .ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ it’s time + to ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻢ
it’s time to finish the job.
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ .ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ it is time + ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻲ
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
151
it’s time you finished the job.
ﺣﺬﻑIF ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ) (if clauseﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ifﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻼ: (1ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ :ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ Shouldﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ If I should see him, I will tell him. ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ Shouldﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ifﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: Should I see him. I will tell him. (2ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ :ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ wereﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ifﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ. If you were here, I would talk to you. Were you here, I would talk to you. (3ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ :ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ hadﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ifﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: if I had gone there, I would have seen him. Had I gone there, I would have seen him. ﻧﻜﺘﻪ Should :ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ« ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ifﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. If I should see him now, I would tell him.
e.
co
m
Should I see him now, I would tell him.
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
152
Unless ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ) (if clauseﺟﺎﻱ ifﻭ notﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺗﻮ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻜﻨﻲ ﻣﺜ ﹰ You won't succeed if you don't try. ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ. ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﻨﻲ. You won’t succeed unless you try. ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ unlessﻣﺜﻞ ifﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. Unless you try, you won't succeed.
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ: If not = unless If = unless not ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: Unless you don’t try, you will succeed = Unless you try, you won't succeed.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
153
Would rather ﻼ ﻓﻌﻞ Preferﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﺒ ﹰ would ratherﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ preferﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ: (1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ Preferﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ would ratherﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ. I prefer to stay there. ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ + Prefer + toﻓﺎﻋﻞ
I would rather stay there. ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ + would rather +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
(2ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ Preferﻭ would ratherﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. I prefer to go rather than to stay. ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ + rather than + toﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ + Prefer + toﻓﺎﻋﻞ
I would rather go than stay. ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ + than +ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ + would rather +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ) (2ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘـﺎﹰ ﺑـﺎ would ratherﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ ﺑـﺎ preferﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ.
m
I prefer walking to staying.
e.
co
I prefer apple to banana.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ /ﺍﺳﻢ + to +ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ /ﺍﺳﻢ + prefer +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
154
(3ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ Preferﻭ would ratherﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. I Prefered to go. ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ + Prefer + toﻓﺎﻋﻞ
I would rather have gone. + would rather + have P.Pﻓﺎﻋﻞ
(4ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ Preferﻭ would ratherﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
I prefer him to go. ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ + toﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ + prefer +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
I would rather him went. ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ+
ﻓﺎﻋﻞ + would rather +
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
155
ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
as if – as though ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ـ ﮔﻮﻳﻲ« ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴـﺖ ﻼ: ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻨﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﺍﻭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺋﻲ ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. He behaves as if he didn’t like his wife. ﭼﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ as ifﻭ as thoughtﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ as ifﻭ as thoughtﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ. She speaks as if she knew the problem. ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ as ifﻭ as thoughtﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. He walked as if he had had a broken leg. ﺍﻭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
156
ﻧﻜﻨﻪ( » « in Case
)ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ
ﻼ: ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ .ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺒﺎﺭﺩ. I take an umbrella with me in case it rains. :In caseﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ + {incase} +ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ/ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ/ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ/ﺍﻣﺮ
Helen has left the door open, in case Her mother comes earlier.
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ + {incase} +ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ/ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ/ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ She was running fast in case she missed the class.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
157
Both ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ. (1ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ. the ﻓﻌﻞ +ﺍﺳﻢ both the + both
both of
ﻓﻌﻞ +ﺿﻤﻴﺮ both of +
Both students study hard. Both of us study hard. (2ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ. The students both study hard. The students can both study hard. The students are both studying hard.
both -ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
158
ﻓﻌﻞ + both +ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ + bothﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ +ﺍﺳﻢ + to be + bothﺍﺳﻢ
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
active & passive voice :
ﻛﻠﻤﻪ Voiceﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ activeﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ passiveﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺍ . ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ passiveﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ . ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ activeﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ) ( Subjectﭼﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .
-1ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ doerﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ . ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : ﻫﻠﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ Hellen studies the book . . -2ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ Subject ﻼ: Suffererﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Hellen is seen by them. -3ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ neither doer not suffererﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ .ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : Hellen is a student.
ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ Subjectﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ suffererﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ Subjectﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ
e.
co
m
ﺍﺳﺖ .
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
159
ﻼ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺒ ﹰ participleﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ . present participle Participle Past participle
ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ :ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ingﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜﻞ : ﺯﻧﺪﻩ
Æ living = alive
ﺩﻭﺍﻥ
running
live
ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
run Æ
ﺩﻭﻳﺪﻥ
ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .
ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ :ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ edﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ . ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ
Æ washed
wash
ﺷﺴﺘﻦ
ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ
Æ
fall
ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ
fallen
ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻔﻌـﻮﻝ ﻧﻤـﻲ
m e.
co
ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ .
I go with him .
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
ﻼ: ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
160
ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ goﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻭ himﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ goﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ withﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ .
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ – ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ – ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ : To be + p p
ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ to beﻭ p.pﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ .
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ : He tells her. ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ : ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ،ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ . ﺏ ( ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ Subject suffererﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ
m e.
co
He tells her.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
She ----------.
161
ﺝ ( ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ byﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ . He tells her. She ----------- by him. ﺩ ( ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ p . pﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ He tells her. She -----------told by him. ﻫـ ( ﻓﻌﻞ to beﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p . pﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ . He tells her. She is told by him.
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
-1ﺍﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 5ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ . -2ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ . ﻼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ . -3ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﺒ ﹰ
co
m
-4ﺁﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .
e.
-5ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺐ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .
ag
an
gu
-6ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺷﺪ . -7ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .
.ir l w w
w
162
-8ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ . -9ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻮﺩ . -10ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
-1ﺁﻥ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﻳﺸﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪ . -2ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ . -3ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ 1694ﻛﺸﻒ ﺷﺪ . -4ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ . -5ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ . -6ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ . -7ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻇﻬﺮ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺷﺪ . -8ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ 80ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .
m
-9ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﻘﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ .
co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
163
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ : ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ-1 Helen tells Bob Æ Bob is told by Helen. : ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ-2 Helene told Bob Æ Bob was told by Helen. : ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ-3 Helen will tell Bob Æ Bob will be told by Helen. : ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ-4 Helen is telling Bob Æ Bob is being told by Helen. : ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ-5 Helen was telling Bob Æ Bob was being told by Helen.
:ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ-6 Helen has told Bob Æ Bob has been told by Helen.
:ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ-7 Helen will have told Bob Æ Bob will have been told by Helen. : ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ-8 Helen had told Bob Æ Bob had been told by Helen.
m
ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ، ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ، ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ4 ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ16 ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ
w w
164
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
. ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ? Did Hellen study the book
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ
ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ :ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ The book was studied by Hellen . ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ . ?Was the book studied by Hellen
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺳـﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﻣﺜـﻞ :
? Where did Hellen take the bookﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ
ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. Was the book taken by Helen. ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ) ( whom,whoﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. ?Where was the book taken by Helen
ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ whoﻭ whomﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ : -1ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ whomﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬـﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘـﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ whomﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ whoﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ. ﻣﺜﻞ : ?Whom did Helen invite
e.
co
m
?Who was invited by Helen
gu
ag
ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ whoﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ:
w
w
w
.ir l
an
?Who saw Helen
165
ﻭ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ by whomﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ : ?By whom was bob seen
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. -1ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﭘﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺷﺪ. -2ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ. -3ﻭﻳﺰﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺗﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪ. -4ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. -5ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. -6ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. -7ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. -8ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﻬﺎ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ. -9ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﭘﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. -10ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
166
ﺟﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ : ﻼ: -1ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ :ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Helen often visits john. ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ p.pﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. John is often visited by Helen.
ﻼ: -2ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ :ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ Helen writes letters carefully. ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ p.pﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ : The letters are carefully written by Helen. : just -2ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ justﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ haveﻳﺎ hadﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻼ: ﻣﺜ ﹰ Helen has just written the letter. ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ justﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﻓﻌﻞ beﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ p.pﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻼ: ﻣﺜ ﹰ The letter has just been written by Helen.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
167
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. -1ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ. -2ﺁﻥ ﻟﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﻴﺪ. -3ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻠﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ؟ -4ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ. -5ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﻳﺾ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ. -6ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻩ. -7ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ. -8ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ. -9ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ. ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ. -10ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺒ ﹰ
ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ
m e.
co
ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ،ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ
an
gu
ag
I write the letter to him.
.ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
.ir l w w
w
168
The letter is written to him by me. He is written the letter by me.
ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ. ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ . I saw Helen play. ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻴﺰﺩ ﺗﺎ subject sufferﺷﻮﺩ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ to ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ. Helen was seen to play. ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ : ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ:
+ be + p.pﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ let +
Open the door Æ let the door be opened.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
169
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻪ
ﺳﺒﺒﻲ :
ﻼ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣـﺜ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﻡ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎ ﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻛﺲ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ.
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ +ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ( +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ + have +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﺐ
I have my brother polish my shoes.
ﻼ: ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ getﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ +ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ + toﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ + get +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﺐ
I get my brother to polish my shoes.
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
co
m
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
e.
-1ﺑﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ag
gu
-2ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪ.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
-3ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ. 170
-4ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻛﻔﺎﺵ ﺗﺨﺖ ﻛﻔﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ. -5ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ. -6ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻡ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ. -7ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ. -8ﻫﻠﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ. -9ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺭﻭ ﻛﻨﺪ. -10ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
p.pﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ +ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ + have/get +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ
I have my shoes polished.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
171
ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ
reported speach
ﻧﻘﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺨﻦ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺳـﺨﻦ ﻳـﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
.1ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ( direct speech ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻘـﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. -1ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ :
Helen says, “I live in Tehran”.
-2ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ :
”?Helen says, “where do you live
-3ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ :
Helen says, “open the window”. ”Helen says, “what a nice car it is
-4ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ :
ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﺮ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ : “I live in Tehran,” Helen says. “Where do you live?” Helen says. “Open the window,” Helen says. “What a nice car it is!” Helen says. ﻼ: ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺜ ﹰ “I live in Tehran,” Says she.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
172
ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ Indirect speech
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﺔ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ .ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ:
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ . ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ : ”Helen said, “I live in Tehran. ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ. ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺣﺬﻑ commaﻭ ﻛﻮﺗﻴﺸﻦ ﻣﺎﺭﻙ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ) ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘـﻞ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ thatﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺑـﻮﺩ ( ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ : … Helen said that ﺏ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ : Helen said that she ... ﺝ( ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﺮ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ : Helen said that she lived in Tehran. ﺩ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷـﮕﺮ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ :ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ 12ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ: ﻼ: (1ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ Helen said to bob, “I know your father”. Helen told Bob that she knew his father.
m e.
co
ﻼ: (2ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ag
”My father said to me, “I am listening to you.
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
My father told me that he was listening to me.
173
:ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﹰ.( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ3 The boy said to the girl, “I haven’t seen your book.” The boy told the girl that he hadn’t seen her book.
:ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﹰ.( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ4 My friend said, “I have been living here for ten years.” My friend said that he had been living here for ten years. :ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﹰ.( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ5 The man said to the woman, “I will see you.” The man told the woman that he would see her. :ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﹰ.( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ6 Ahmad said, “I will be working on Friday.” Ahmad said that he would be working on Friday morning.
:ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﹰ.( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ7 Bob said, “I will have finished the book on April.” Bob said that he would have finished the book on April.
: ﻣﺜﻼ.( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ8 Bob said, “I will have been studying for two years by April.” Bob said that he would have been studying for two years by April.
co
m
:ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﹰ.( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ9
e.
My father said to me, “I saw your umberella.”
w w
174
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
My father told me that he had seen my umberella.
ﻳﺎﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ :ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﮕـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﻼ: ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻜﺮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ My father told me that he saw my umberella.
ﻼ: (10ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ ”Bob said, “I was listening to the music. Bob said that he had been listening to music.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺩﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻼ: ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ ”The woman said, “I had left home. The woman said that she had left home.
”Bob said, “I had been playing for two hours. Bob said that he had been playing for two hours.
ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ) ( reporting tagﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ say toﻳﺎ tellﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ .ﻣﺜﻼ: ”Helen said to/told Bob, “I know your father.
ﺍﻣّﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ say toﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ tellﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜﻼ:
e.
co
m
Helen told Bob that she knew his father
ag gu an .ir l w w
w
175
» ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ « ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ: ”?Helen said to me, “where do you live ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ) ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ( ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ whﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ : Helen asked me where I lived.
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ . -1ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﭼﺎﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ . -2ﻣﺮﺩ ﺍﺯﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻼﻫﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. -3ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺩﺭﺱ 2ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ. -4ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ. -5ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺶ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. -6ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ . -7ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺶ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ . -8ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 5ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ .
m e.
co
-9ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
-10ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ .
176
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ: ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ. ”?Helen said to Bob, “do you live in Tehran ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ifو whetherﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻼ: ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Helen asked Bob if he lived in Tehran. ﻓﻌﻞ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ask
ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ifﻭ whetherﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ : ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ : ”Helen said to Bob, “open the door. ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ) (toﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻼ: ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ( not toﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ Helen told Bob to open the door. ”Helen said to Bob, “don’t open the door. Helen told Bob not to open the door.
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻼ: ﻣﺜ ﹰ
m co
”Helen said to Bob, “open the door before you come in.
e.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺎ toﺭﺑﻂ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﺸﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ
ag
an
gu
ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ : Helen told Bob to open the door before he comes in.
.ir l w w
w
177
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
-1ﻣﻦ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻡ. -2ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ. -3ﺑﺪﻩ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. -4ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺮﻭﺳﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﻃﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ. -5ﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ. ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. -1ﻗﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. -2ﭘﻠﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺯﺩ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺪ. -3ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﭼﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﭘﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ. -4ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺷﻠﻮﻍ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ. -5ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ :
m e.
co
ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
178
The following + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ next + → ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
The next + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ The + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ+ after
The + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ+ before last + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
→ The + previous + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
today → that day tonight → that night now → then here → there come → go this → that Helen said to Bob, “I will meet you next week.”
w w
179
w
.ir l
an
gu
ag
e.
co
m
Helen told Bob that she would meet him the next week.
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ : ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ: !What a nice car it is
! ﻓﻌﻞ +ﺿﻤﻴﺮ /ﺍﺳﻢ +ﺍﺳﻢ +ﺻﻔﺖ what + a/an + ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ :
! ﻓﻌﻞ +ﺿﻤﻴﺮ /ﺍﺳﻢ +ﻗﻴﺪ how + !How slowly she drives
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ”!Helen said, “how slowly the man works ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ whatﻭ ﻳﺎ howﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ Helen exclaimed how slowly the man worked.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
180
ﺍﺳﻢ
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ) ( gerund
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﻫـﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ingﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Æ living
ﺯﻧﺪﻩ
being
ﺑﻮﺩ ،ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ،ﻭﺟﻮﺩ
live
ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
be Æ
ﺑﻮﺩﻥ
ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ : -1ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ . toﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻼ: ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ After locking the door, I left home. She is afraid of telling lies. -2ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ: To swim here is enjoyable. Swimming here is enjoyable. -3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ:
e.
co
m
ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ – ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
defer
ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
avoid
ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ
delay
ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
appreciate
ag
ﺗﻨﻔﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
detest
ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
discuss
ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ
enjoy
ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
consider
ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
finish
ﭼﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ
can’t help
w
w
w
.ir l
an
gu
ﻧﺼﺤﻴﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
advise
ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻦ
181
admit
ﻋﻔﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
forgive
ﺍﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ
include
ﻗﺪﻏﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
forbid
keep
ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
imagine
ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
mention
ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ
oppose
ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
quit
ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ
ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ
risk
ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﭙﺮﺩﻥ
deny
mind postpone
remember
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
practice
ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ
stop
ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ
resume
ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
tolerate
ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
suggest
understand
ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ
I enjoy reading the newspaper. ﻼ: ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ) (′sﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ I appreciate her speaking. I appreciate Helen’s speaking.
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ : -1ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
co
m
-2ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ.
e.
-3ﺍﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﺶ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
ag
-4ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
gu
w
w
w
.ir l
an
-5ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﺠﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ.
182
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. -1ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ. -2ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻟﻮﮒ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ. -3ﻣﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ. -4ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ. -5ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺱ ﻛﺒﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ :ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻳـﻚ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ) (′sﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. I appreciate her working. I appreciate Helen’s working.
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
183
ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ :to ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ preferﻭ startﻭ planﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ to ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: Helen prefers to go. Helen prefers going. ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ remember , stopﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻴﺸـﺎﻥ ﻓـﺮﻕ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ: ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ stopﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ stopﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻼ: ﻛﺸﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻢ. I stop speaking to the man. ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ stopﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ، ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ stopﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﺪ. ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻢ . I stopped to speak to the man. ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ rememberﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ rememberﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ. ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ. Helen remembers locking the door. ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ rememberﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﺎﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ rememberﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ rememberﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ ) ( not forgetﺍﺳﺖ
m e.
co
ﻼ: ﻣﺜ ﹰ
gu
ag
ﻫﻠﻦ ﻳﺎﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ . Helen remembers to lock the door.
an .ir l w w
w
184
ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ : ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻼ: ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
she parked the car. She went shopping.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻓـﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ (Present . ) prefectﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ:
Have + ing + p.p
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ( after ) having parked the car, she went shopping.
ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ
m co e. ag gu an .ir l w w
w
185